دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung Manualsbridge camerasNX10

ﺔﻠﺼﻔﻣ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺗ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ ﻦﻤﻀﺘﻳ

.ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﺔﻴﻔﻴﻛ ﻝﻮﺣ

ﻼﻣﺎﻛ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻰﺟﺮﻳ

ȝƾŸǞǤǞƓȚǋŲȖȰǞźǍƲſȚ Ä

ﻊﻳﺮﺳ ﻊﺟﺮﻣ

ﺕﺎﻳﻮﺘﺤﻤﻟﺍ

ﺔﻴﺳﺎﺳﻷﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻮﻟﺍ

ﺔﻴﺳﺎﺳﻷﺍ ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺘﻟﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻭ

ﺔﻣﺪﻘﺘﻤﻟﺍ ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺘﻟﺍ ﻒﺋﺎﻇﻭ

ﺮﻳﺮﺤﺘﻟﺍ/ﺽﺮﻌﻟﺍ

ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﺕﺍﺩﺍﺪﻋﺇ ﺔﻤﺋﺎﻗ

ﻖﺣﻼﻣ

User Manual

NX10

Summary of content (129 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﻳﺘﻀﻤﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ‪.
PAGE 2
‫‪ǀžǾƉŽȚȶ ǀƇƫŽȚ ȝƾžǞƴƯž‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺧﻄﺮﺓ ﻭﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﻐﺒﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺳﺘﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﻠﻊ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ .
PAGE 4
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.
PAGE 5
‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ )‬ ‫‪) Smart Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬ ‫(‪.
PAGE 6
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪3‬‬ ‫)‪3‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪1‬‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫)‪1‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫)‪1‬‬ ‫)‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫‪1)1‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫(‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫] [‬ ‫ﺃﺯ
PAGE 7
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ([ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪) Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ([‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ .ISO‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 8
‫‪ǕƁǍŴ ǕűǍž‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻸﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫‪Beauty Shot ĸ‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ‪47W‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪56‬‬ ‫• ‪Face Detection AF‬‬ ‫)‪ AF‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ( ‪64W‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪45W‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫• ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪55W‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪59W ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ ĸ‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺼﻴﺎﺕ ‪39W‬‬ ‫• ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪68W‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪59W ISO‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪66W‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪67W‬‬ ‫‪) BRK‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻴﻒ(
PAGE 9
‫‪ȝƾƁǞƄƤȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪12 ...................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪13 ..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء‪14 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﺒﻮﺗﺮ‪/‬ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ‪16..............‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪17...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪18 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪18..............
PAGE 10
‫‪ȝƾƁǞƄƤȚ‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ‪50 .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪51 ................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪51.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪52....................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪52.........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ‪53..........................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ‪54 ..................
PAGE 11
‫‪ȝƾƁǞƄƤȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪78 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪102 .............................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ‪79 .....................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪79....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ ‪81........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‪81.......................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪82.......................................
PAGE 12
‫‪ ǀƸŴƾŴǈȚ ǗǣƾŷǞŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴ ﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺮﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ……………………………………………… ‪13‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء …………………………………………… ‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ …………………………………………… ‪18‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‪23 ………………………………… .
PAGE 13
‫‪ȝƾƁǞƄƤȚ ǖƁǍƱů‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻭﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ(‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 14
‫‪Ȕǎű ǚż ǀƱƸŷȶȶ ǛŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺩﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(73‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(58‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(16‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﻭﺍﺭ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(7‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(23‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(55‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠـ ‪/AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(61‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(21‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(37‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(22‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ
PAGE 15
‫‪Ȕǎű ǚż ǀƱƸŷȶȶ ǛŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(16‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) AEL‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(77‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪)MENU‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(26‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) EV‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(43‬‬ ‫* ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪) DISP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(28‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )‪) (Fn‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(27‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(16‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(5‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪ /‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(82‬‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(79‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(19‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫* ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ EVF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ
PAGE 16
‫‪Ȕǎű ǚż ǀƱƸŷȶȶ ǛŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﺒﻮﺗﺮ‪/‬ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻔﻚ ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.
PAGE 17
‫‪Ȕǎű ǚż ǀƱƸŷȶȶ ǛŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫]‪[SAMSUNG 30mm F2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪AF/MF‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(34‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪OIS‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(35‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(33‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫]‪[SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 OIS‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.
PAGE 18
‫‪ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ ǚƃŻ ǎƸƷƆƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻀﻼ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪CHARGE‬‬ ‫‪INSERT‬‬ ‫‪INSERT‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫‪INSERT‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫• ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﺭﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻀﻼ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ SAMSUNG .‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺛﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 19
‫‪ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ ǚƃŻ ǎƸƷƆƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻢ ﺍﺟﺬﺏ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 20
‫‪ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ ǚƃŻ ǎƸƷƆƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺰﻋﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻀﻼ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ ǚƃŻ ǎƸƷƆƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ‪ /‬ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻲ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ( ﺑﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻜﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪Ȕǎű ǚż ǀƱƸŷȶȶ ǛŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺤﺮﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ‪.
PAGE 23
.ǠŽȶǈȚ ǚƸưƪƄŽȚȶ ǀŻƾƭŽȚ ǚƸǧǞů .[ ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬Language ‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬T] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ 1 .[ ] ‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬W/X/T/S] ‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬2 .‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ • Date Time Zone 23 Time 00 : 00 Language English Exit OK Change ‫ )ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬Date ‫[ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬T/S] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ .[ ] 3 ‫[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬W/X/T/S] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ .
PAGE 24
‫‪.ǠŽȶǈȚ ǚƸưƪƄŽȚȶ ǀŻƾƭŽȚ ǚƸǧǞů‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪) Time Zone‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[W/X‬‬ ‫‪Time Zone‬‬ ‫‪01:10 AM‬‬ ‫‪2010/01/01‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪London‬‬ ‫]‪[GMT +00:00‬‬ ‫‪MENU Back‬‬ ‫‪DST‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[S‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [S‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ] [ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [T‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻭ ‪) Time‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫] [‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪.ǠŽȶǈȚ ǚƸưƪƄŽȚȶ ǀŻƾƭŽȚ ǚƸǧǞů‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪SFlb .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫‪AM 2010.01.01‬‬ ‫‪12:000AM‬‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫‪C‬‬ ‫‪SF‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫‪SF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫‪F3.
PAGE 26
‫‪ȝȚȤƾƸƒȚ ǋŲȖ/ǀƵǣƾƲŽȚ ȤƾƸƄųȚ ȰǍŶ‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ,[MENU‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺩﻓﻊ ]‪ [T/S‬ﺃﻭ ]‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪ [W/X/T/S‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪ȝȚȤƾƸƒȚ ǋŲȖ/ǀƵǣƾƲŽȚ ȤƾƸƄųȚ ȰǍŶ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪[Fn‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]‪ [W/X‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪P‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.P‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪ȝǞƫŽȚȶ ȩǍƯŽȚ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‪ [DISP‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[DISP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻭﺻﺎﻑ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 29
‫‪ȝǞƫŽȚȶ ȩǍƯŽȚ ǀŵƾŵ ȢȚǋŸȘ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) User setup‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ) ‪ĸ ( 1‬‬ ‫‪) User Display‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫‪2010.01.01‬‬ ‫‪09:45‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) Sound ĸ ( 2 ) 2‬ﺻﻮﺕ( ‪ĸ‬‬ ‫‪) System Volume‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 30
‫‪ȝǞƫŽȚȶ ȩǍƯŽȚ ǀŵƾŵ ȢȚǋŸȘ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫)‪3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪3‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪ȤǞƫŽȚ ȪƾƲƄŽǽ ǀƭƸƉƃŽȚ ǀƲƁǍƭŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫‪SMART‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪OIS‬‬ ‫‪0001‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺎﺣﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫● ﺃﺣﻤﺮ‪ :‬ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪ȝƾƷƸűǞů‬‬ ‫‪ǉǤȶȖ ȜȤǞǧ ǟƴŸ ȲǞƫƇƴŽ‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺷﻌﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ)ﺹ‪.(35.‬‬ ‫‪SF‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻟﻤﻼﺑﺲ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺿﻮء ﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺿﻮء ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﻗﻮﻱ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻄﻲ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﻗﻮﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻻ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.
PAGE 34
‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AF‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﻘﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ‪ AF/MF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .MF‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ )‪(OIS‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ)‪ (OIS‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺮﻛﺰ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ OIS‬ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ OIS‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ OIS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [OIS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ‪ OIS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،OIS‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ OIS‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪3 ) 3‬‬ ‫‪3/‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫( ‪ĸ OIS ĸ‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪OIS‬‬ ‫‪OIS‬‬ ‫‪Mode 1‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ (‪1‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ OIS‬ﺇﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻨﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Mode 2‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(2‬‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ OIS‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪.
PAGE 37
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺃﻗﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ (f‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ً‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ؟‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻌﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪ ǀƸŴƾŴǈȚ ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ Ǘǣƾŷȶ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪Ǡżȣ ǠǣƾƲƴů ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻴﺄﺓ ﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪SFlb .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺪﺉ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺼﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪ǃžƾſǍƃŽȚ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.P‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ؟‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪ȸȶǋƸŽȚ ǕǤǞŽȚ ȶȖ ȬȚǍƫƓȚ ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ȶȖ ǀŴǋƯŽȚ ǀƇƄź ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪ȸȶǋƸŽȚ ǕǤǞŽȚ ȶȖ ȬȚǍƫƓȚ ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ȶȖ ǀŴǋƯŽȚ ǀƇƄź ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺎً ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻫﻮ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﻄﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .
PAGE 43
‫‪ȸȶǋƸŽȚ ǕǤǞŽȚ ȶȖ ȬȚǍƫƓȚ ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ȶȖ ǀŴǋƯŽȚ ǀƇƄź ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺿﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ‘‘ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ’’‪) .
PAGE 44
‫‪ȸȶǋƸŽȚ ǕǤǞŽȚ ȶȖ ȬȚǍƫƓȚ ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ȶȖ ǀŴǋƯŽȚ ǀƇƄź ǀƁǞŽȶȖ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) Bulb‬ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪) "30‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪14M‬‬ ‫‪SF‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪OIS‬‬ ‫‪0173‬‬ ‫''‪00'00‬‬ ‫‪Bulb F3.
PAGE 45
‫‪ǠƯƸƃŶ ǍƮƶž/Ǒƈŵ ȜȤǞǧ/ǚƸŽ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪ǍƮƶƓȚ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺇﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺮﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪Beauty Shot‬‬ ‫‪Set‬‬ ‫‪OK‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪MENU Back‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪ǍƮƶƓȚ ǕǤȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) SCENE ĸ ( 1 ) 1‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ( ‪ĸ‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪) Beauty Shot‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪3‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪Level 1‬‬ ‫( ‪) Face Tone ĸ‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ(‪.
PAGE 48
‫‪ǛƴƸź ǚƸƆƉů‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ )‪ .(720×1280‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 25‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ H.264‬ﺃﻱ )‪.(MPEG-4.AVC‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫( ‪) Quality ĸ‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪1‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪3 ) 3‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻟﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪ǛƴƸź ǚƸƆƉů‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺠﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺰﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪ ǀžǋƲƄƓȚ ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ Ǘǣƾŷȶ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪ȜȢǞƐȚȶ ǀŻǋŽȚ ǀűȤȢ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻘﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪Photo Size ĸ ( 1 )1‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 52
‫‪ȜȢǞƐȚȶ ǀŻǋŽȚ ǀűȤȢ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺣﺪﻯ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪.RAW‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) Quality ĸ ( 1 ) 1‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ‪ĸ‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪ȜȢǞƐȚȶ ǀŻǋŽȚ ǀűȤȢ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ) ‪Noise Reduction ĸ ( 1‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪High ISO NR‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ(‬ ‫)‪ٍ ISO NR‬‬ ‫‪Long Term NR‬‬ ‫)‪ NR‬ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫)‪.(3200‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ .
PAGE 54
‫‪ǁŻƻƓȚ ǀƱƸŷȶ ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫( ‪) Drive ĸ‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‪ [Fn‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ]‪.[W/X‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ 30 ~ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪ǛƴƮž ȴƾƳž Ǡź ȜȤǞǧ ȪƾƲƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫‪،‬‬ ‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻻﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻻﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪SMART‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.
PAGE 56
‫‪ ǛƴƮž ȴƾƳž Ǡź ȜȤǞǧ ȪƾƲƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻣﻊ ﺇﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪I .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Auto+Red‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺣﻤﺮﺍء( ﺃﻭ ‪Fill-in Red‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻞء‪+‬ﺣﻤﺮﺍء(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪) 1st Curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ‪ (1‬ﻭ ‪2nd Curtain‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ‪ (2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 57
‫‪ ǛƴƮž ȴƾƳž Ǡź ȜȤǞǧ ȪƾƲƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫( ‪) Flash ĸ‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‪ [Fn‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪.[W/X‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻘﺎﺹ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ )‪.
PAGE 58
‫‪ ǛƴƮž ȴƾƳž Ǡź ȜȤǞǧ ȪƾƲƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )ﺗﺸﺘﺮﻯ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ A-TTL‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ )‪ SEF20A‬ﺃﻭ ‪.(SEF42A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪".SEF20A" ،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪ ǛƴƮž ȴƾƳž Ǡź ȜȤǞǧ ȪƾƲƄŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﻤﻨﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﻴﺔ )‪ ،(ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺘﻔﺎﻋﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪1 ) 1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 60
‫‪ȜȤƻƃŽȚ ǓƃǤ ȰǍŶ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﺎﻟﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪AF Mode ĸ ( 2 / 2 ) 2‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ĸ (AF‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪Single AF‬‬ ‫)‪ AF‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪ȜȤƻƃŽȚ ǓƃǤ ȰǍŶ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ) ‪1‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫( ‪AF Lamp ĸ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻭﺣﻴﻮﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪ȜȤƻƃŽȚ ǓƃǤ ȰǍŶ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) AF Area ĸ ( 2) 2‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ĸ (AF‬‬ ‫‪) Selection AF‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪.(AF‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‪ [W/X/T/S‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪ȜȤƻƃŽȚ ǓƃǤ ȰǍŶ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪MF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ )‪ ،(MF‬ﺗﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺘﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪2‬‬ ‫( ‪) MF Assist ĸ‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ ‪.(MF‬‬ ‫)‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪ǝűǞŽȚ ȯƾƪƄżȚ‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻔﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﺘﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻭﺟﻮﻩ ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪ǝűǞŽȚ ȯƾƪƄżȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ,‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) AF Area ĸ ( 2 ) 2‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫‪ AF) Self-Portrait AF ĸ‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺗﻴﺔ( ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺻﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫)ﺭﻧﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ(‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ,‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ‪-‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ‪+‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ]ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ[ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﺪﻯ‬ ‫"‪."±3‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫] [‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪Metering ĸ ( 3 / 3) 3‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Spot‬ﻣﺮﻛﺰ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪Center-weighted‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪) Multi‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﺑﺔ ﻟﻤﺎ ﻧﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺄﻋﻴﻨﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺃﺛﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ĸ ( 1 / 1 ) 1‬‬ ‫‪) White Balance‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪.[Fn‬‬ ‫‪WB Adjust‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :G‬ﺃﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫‪ :A‬ﺃﺻﻔﺮ‬ ‫‪ :M‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰﻱ‬ ‫‪ :B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻠﺌﻬﺎ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘ ﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻪ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ؟‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ĸ ( 1 / 1 ) 1‬‬ ‫‪) White Balance‬ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪) .Color Temp‬ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[Fn‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪Color Space ĸ ( 1 ) 1‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.sRGB‬‬ ‫‪RGB‬‬ ‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ,Adobe RGB‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ "‪ "_SAMXXXX.JPG‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ȴǞŽȶ ȬǞƭŴ ǓƃǤ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫▲ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫▲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪Smart Range ĸ ( 3 ) 3‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ,‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪.ISO 100‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻭ ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ ǀƲƁǍŶ ǍƸƸưů‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺴﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪) Timer‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.
PAGE 74
‫‪ǍƁǞƫƄŽȚ ǀƲƁǍŶ ǍƸƸưů‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪3‬‬ ‫‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪3‬‬ ‫( ‪) BKT Set ĸ‬ﺿﺒﻂ ‪(BKT‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪BKT Set‬‬ ‫‪AE BKT Set‬‬ ‫‪AB -/+3‬‬ ‫‪WB BKT Set‬‬ ‫‪P Wiz BKT Set‬‬ ‫‪Change‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪OK‬‬ ‫‪Exit‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ǚƸƳƪů ȜȢƾŸȘ/ǀǧƾų ȝȚǍƸŰƺů‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺃﺟﻮﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﻔﻌﺎﻻﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪Picture Wizard ĸ ( 1 ) 1‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ǉƸƇƫů/ȝȚǍƸŰƺƄŽȚ ǘƸƃƭů‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺜﻼﺙ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪Picture Wizard ĸ ( 1 ) 1‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪) Custom ĸ‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪ǉƸůƾƱƓȚ ǓƸƭƈů‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ) ‪Key Mapping ĸ ( 1‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ( ‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AEL‬‬ ‫‪Preview‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺃﻭﻟﻴﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪. [AEL‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ AEL‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ AFL‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.
PAGE 78
‫‪ ǍƁǍƇƄŽȚ/ȩǍƯŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫[‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [DISP‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻌﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ]‪.[W/X‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪RAW‬‬ ‫‪100-0001‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪18mm‬‬ ‫‪AWB‬‬ ‫‪0.
PAGE 80
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪100-0001‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪Y‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪18mm‬‬ ‫‪2010.01.01‬‬ ‫‪RAW‬‬ ‫‪100 00004/00009‬‬ ‫‪4592 X 3056‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪F3.5‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪1/40‬‬ ‫‪Video size 1280 X 720‬‬ ‫‪Date 2010.01.
PAGE 81
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺑﺤﺴﺐ ﻓﺌﺎﺗﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻐﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﺎﻟﻴﻮﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺒﻮﻉ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﺘﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ] [ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫] [ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [AEL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [AEL‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [MENU‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫[ ‪) Delete ĸ‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ‪) All ĸ‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ] [ ‪) Auto Rotate ĸ‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪) On ĸ‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫[ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ(‬ ‫)ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪] ĸ [MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.4‬‬ ‫‪Images‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ )ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪x1.
PAGE 85
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Slide Show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ‪Play ĸ‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ‪repeat‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‪.[W/X‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.
PAGE 86
‫‪(ǛƴƸź/ȜȤǞǧ) ȩǍŸ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [T‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺺ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻘﺺ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ‪ĸ‬‬ ‫] [ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ǍƁǍƎ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﺪﺓ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪) Rotating‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Image Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪Resize ĸ‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) Image Edit‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪Rotate ĸ‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Resize‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ǍƁǍƎ‬‬ ‫‪) Red-eye fix‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ] [ ‪) Image Edit ĸ‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪ĸ‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ‪) Red-eye Fix‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ]‪.[MENU‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ] [ ‪) Image Edit ĸ‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪) Backlight ĸ‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ(‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ǍƁǍƎ‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﺔ ‪ MISC‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﺧﺬ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻤﺤﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‪ ĸ [MENU‬ﻋﺮﺽ ] [ ‪ĸ DPOF ĸ‬‬ ‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪ȜȤǞƫŽȚ ǍƁǍƎ‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ĸ DPOF ĸ [MENU‬‬ ‫‪) SIZE‬ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ( ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Select‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ(‬ ‫‪) All‬ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Reset‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ]‪ [Fn‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪ȠǞǤǞŽȚ ǠŽƾŸ ȴǞƁǎƱƴƄŽȚ ȶȖ ȸȢƾƯŽȚ ȴǞƁǎƱƴƄŽȚ ǟƴŸ ȝƾƱƴƓȚ ȩȚǍƯƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ‪ A/V .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(107‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪ȠǞǤǞŽȚ ǠŽƾŸ ȴǞƁǎƱƴƄŽȚ ȶȖ ȸȢƾƯŽȚ ȴǞƁǎƱƴƄŽȚ ǟƴŸ ȝƾƱƴƓȚ ȩȚǍƯƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ‪HDTV‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻟﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(107‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‪ĸ [MENU] ,‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) HDMI Size ĸ ( 3 ) 3‬ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫‪ ĸ‬ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.
PAGE 93
‫نقل امللفات إلى الكمبيوتر‬ ‫بالنسبة لمستخدمي ‪Windows‬‬ ‫متطلبات برنامج ‪QuickTime Player 7.6‬‬ ‫•معالج ‪ ،Intel Pentium 4‬سرعة ‪ 3.2‬جيجاهرتز أو أعلى ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ AMD Athlon™ 64FX ،2.6‬جيجاهرتز أو أعلى‬ ‫•‪ Windows XP service pack2‬أو ‪Vista‬‬ ‫•ذاكرة عشوائية ‪ RAM 512‬ميجابايت بحد أدنى‬ ‫(يفضل ‪ 1‬جيجابايت أو أعلى)‬ ‫•يوصى باستخدام ‪ nVIDIA Geforce 7600GT‬أو أعلى ‪/‬يوصى‬ ‫بسلسلة ‪ ATI X1600‬أو أعلى‬ ‫نقل الملفات بتوصيل الكاميرا بالكمبيوتر‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪ǍůǞƸƃƵƳŽȚ ǟŽȘ ȝƾƱƴƓȚ ǚƲſ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪Samsung Digital‬‬ ‫‪) Camera Installer‬ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻴﻤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ‪) Exit‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء( ﻻﺳﺘﻜﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪ǍůǞƸƃƵƳŽȚ ǟŽȘ ȝƾƱƴƓȚ ǚƲſ‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪.Computer‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪← My Computer‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺯﺍﻟﺔ ← ‪،"XXXPHOTO" ← DCIM‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ "‪."XXX_MMDD‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺤﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪(Windows XP‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪ Windows 2000‬ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ‪.
PAGE 96
‫‪ǍůǞƸƃƵƳŽȚ ǟŽȘ ȝƾƱƴƓȚ ǚƲſ‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻲ ‪Mac‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎﻛﻨﺘﻮﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪QuickTime Player 7.6‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ 1.8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ Power Mac G5 / 1.83‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬ ‫‪ Intel Core Duo‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫• ‪ Mac OS X‬ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 10.4.
PAGE 97
‫‪ǍůǞƸƃƵƳŽȚ ǟŽȘ ȝƾƱƴƓȚ ǚƲſ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫➌‬ ‫➍‬ ‫➋ ➊‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪.H.264 (MPEG-4‬‬ ‫‪ ((AVC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung Master‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻣﺒﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﻨﺰﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 98
‫‪Samsung RAW Converter ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ,the Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ‪ TIFF‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ . RAW‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻭ‪.Vista‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Ì‬ﺷﺮﻳﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ,‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ]‪ĸ All Programs ĸ Start‬‬ ‫‪ĸ Samsung RAW Converter‬‬ ‫‪[Samsung RAW Converter‬‬ ‫]ﺍﻧﺤﻴﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ[‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.
PAGE 99
‫‪Samsung RAW Converter ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟـ‪ Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪RAW‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung RAW‬‬ ‫‪.Converter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 100
‫‪Samsung RAW Converter ȳȚǋƈƄŴȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG/TIFF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪RAW‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ,Samsung RAW Converter‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG/TIFF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟـ ‪ .RAW‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ TIFF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪.RAW Converter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.
PAGE 101
‫‪(PictBridge) ȤǞƫŽȚ ǀƯŮƾƭŮ ȤǞƫŽȚ ǀŸƾƃŶ‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪One Photo‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫‪Size‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫‪Layout‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫‪Type‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫‪Quality‬‬ ‫‪Auto‬‬ ‫‪MENU Exit‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻓﺬﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 102
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ȝȚȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.
PAGE 103
ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ȝȚȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ .‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ .‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬MENU]‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ 1 ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‬ 2 ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ 1 2 3 Quickview 1 2 1 3 1sec Display Adjust 103 Display Save 3min Power Save 1min Date&Time Sound MENU Exit OK Change ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬ 2 3 Sound System Volume Medium AF Sound On Button Sound On MENU Exit OK Change .
PAGE 104
‫‪ǀƂƸƃŽȚ ȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ‬‬ ‫‪) Sound‬ﺻﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪System‬‬ ‫‪Volume‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺎﻝ((‬ ‫)‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) Low ,‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪) Medium ,‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(*‪High ,‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪AF Sound‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Off) .AF‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪) On ,‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(*(‬ ‫‪Button Sound‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪104‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪) Off) .
PAGE 105
‫‪ǀƂƸƃŽȚ ȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪) 1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫)‪) Yes‬ﻧﻌﻢ(‪) No ،‬ﻻ(*(‬ ‫‪) Format‬ﺻﻴﻐﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Reset‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪) .
PAGE 106
‫‪ǀƂƸƃŽȚ ȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪) 2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Power Save‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪Date & Time‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‪0.5) 0.5 min) .‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(*‪1) 1min ,‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪3) 3min ,‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪,‬‬ ‫‪5) 5min‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪10) 10min ,‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪30) 30min ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ((‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺠﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.
PAGE 107
‫‪ǀƂƸƃŽȚ ȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪) 3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫(‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪Display‬‬ ‫‪Select‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫‪Sensor‬‬ ‫‪Cleaning‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‬ ‫‪Video Out‬‬ ‫)ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬ ‫‪Anynet+‬‬ ‫)‪(HDMI-CEC‬‬ ‫‪) Auto Select‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(* ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭ‪ EVF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 108
‫‪ǀƂƸƃŽȚ ȢȚǋŸȘ ǀƵǣƾŻ‬‬ ‫‪HDMI Size‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫‪Firmware‬‬ ‫‪Update‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ HDTV‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪) Auto :NTSC‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(*‪(1080i, 720p, 480p ،‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ‪) Auto :PAL‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(*‪(1080i, 720p, 576p ،‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ HDTV‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺇﻟﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﺮﻗﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.
PAGE 109
‫‪ ǘŲǾž‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.
PAGE 110
‫‪ƺƭƒȚ ǚǣƾŴȤ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪Card Error‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫• ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺷﻐﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(105‬‬ ‫‪Card Locked‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻗﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DCF Full Error‬‬ ‫)ﺧﻄﺄ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ‪(DCF‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ .DCF‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .
PAGE 111
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ǀſƾƸǧ‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‬ ‫ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﺖ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺭﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﻨﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.
PAGE 112
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ǀſƾƸǧ‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﺳﻌﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ 1‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )‪ SD (Secure Digital‬ﻭ‬ ‫)‪.SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺼﻖ )ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ(‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ǀſƾƸǧ‬‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫‪BP1310‬‬ ‫‪) Type‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ‪-‬ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪mAh 1,300‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ‬ ‫‪ 7.4‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫)ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪min 150‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 200‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ‪ /‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 400‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪min 130‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺳﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ Samsung‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 114
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ǀſƾƸǧ‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 115
‫‪ǀžǋƒȚ ǎżǍƙ ȲƾƫůǽȚ ǚƃŻ‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺗﻚ‪ ،‬ﺟﺮﺏ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻇﻠﺖ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 116
‫‪ǀžǋƒȚ ǎżǍƙ ȲƾƫůǽȚ ǚƃŻ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(105‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ )ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻻ ﺑﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻔﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺎﻳﻴﺲ ‪ .(DCF‬ﺇﻥ ﺻﺎﺩﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .
PAGE 117
‫‪ǀžǋƒȚ ǎżǍƙ ȲƾƫůǽȚ ǚƃŻ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪A/V and HDMI‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﻄﻞ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.
PAGE 118
‫مواصفات الكاميرا‬ ‫المواصفات‬ ‫مستشعر‬ ‫الصورة‬ ‫المواصفات‬ ‫النوع‬ ‫‪CMOS‬‬ ‫حجم المستشعر‬ ‫‪15.6×23.4‬مم‬ ‫الدقة‬ ‫وحدات البكسل‬ ‫الفعالة‬ ‫‪ 14.6‬ميجا بكسل تقريباً‬ ‫مجال الرؤية‬ ‫حوالي ‪100%‬‬ ‫إجمالي وحدات‬ ‫البكسل‬ ‫‪ 15.1‬ميجا بكسل تقريباً‬ ‫التكبير‬ ‫حوالي‬ ‫)‪0.86 × (APS-C, 50mm, -1m-1‬‬ ‫قطعة العين‬ ‫حوالي ‪20.2‬مم‬ ‫ترشيح اللون‬ ‫ترشيح لون أولي‪RGB‬‬ ‫ضبط الديوبيتر‬ ‫حوالي ‪. -4.0 ~ +2.
PAGE 119
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ȝƾƱǧȚǞž‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪TTL 247 (19x13) Block‬‬ ‫‪segment‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﻣﻞء‪ ،‬ﻣﻞء ‪+‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭ ‪ ،2‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ‪11 (ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪ ،1/3EV ،1/2EV) ±3 EV‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﺴﻌﺔ ‪28‬ﻣﻢ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪35‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫‪ AE‬ﻗﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ‪AEL‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‪.
PAGE 120
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ȝƾƱǧȚǞž‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ AE ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪ AE ،‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺺ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺟﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﺺ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻏﺮﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺠﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻃﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻠﺞ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪JPEG (3:2):‬‬ ‫‪14M (4592x3056),‬‬ ‫‪10M (3872x2592),‬‬ ‫‪6M (3008x2000),‬‬ ‫‪2M (1920x1280),‬‬ ‫‪1.
PAGE 121
‫‪ȚǍƸžƾƳŽȚ ȝƾƱǧȚǞž‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ)ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ( ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SD‬ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SDHC‬ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻧﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 8‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪RAW (SRW), JPEG (EXIF‬‬ ‫‪2.21), DCF, DPOF 1.1,‬‬ ‫‪PictBridge 1.0‬‬ ‫‪14M : RAW 35‬‬ ‫‪ : 14M‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ‪ ،142‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪،278‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪408‬‬ ‫‪ : 10M‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ‪ ،197‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪،382‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪724‬‬ ‫‪ : 6M‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ‪ ،322‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪،615‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪1128‬‬ ‫‪ : 2M‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ‪ ،738‬ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪،1334‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ‪2238‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﻓﺎﻉ )‪ (1.
PAGE 122
‫‪ǀŴǋƯŽȚ ȝƾƱǧȚǞž‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG 30mm F2‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG 18-55mm F3.5-5.6 OIS‬‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG 50-200mm F4-5.6 OIS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻢ )ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 46.2‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻴﻐﺔ‬ ‫‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 18-55‬ﻣﻢ )ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 27.7-84.7‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 50-200‬ﻣﻢ )ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪ 77-308‬ﻣﻢ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻴﻐﺔ ‪ 35‬ﻣﻢ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪ 1‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 12‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ 9‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪ 1‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺮﻭﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪ 17‬ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪ 13‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫)‪ 2‬ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺸﺘﻴﺖ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﺘﻀﻤﻨﺔ(‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪50.
PAGE 123
‫‪(ǀƁȤƾƸƄųǽȚ ȔȚǎűǈȚ) ȝƾƸŽƾƵƳŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪30‬ﻣﻢ‪ 18-55 ،‬ﻣﻢ ﻭ‪ 50-200‬ﻫﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪Samsung Camera NX. SFlb‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ )‪ SD (Secure Digital‬ﻭ‬ ‫)‪SDHC (Secure Digital High Capacity‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪A/V‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.A/V‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‪.
PAGE 124
‫‪(ǀƁȤƾƸƄųǽȚ ȔȚǎűǈȚ) ȝƾƸŽƾƵƳŽȚ‬‬ ‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﺣﺰﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﻓﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ )‪ SEF20A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (SEF42A‬ﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫)‪ HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ‪.
PAGE 125
‫‪ȦǍƷź‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪98 Samsung Raw Converter‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻓﺮﺩﻱ ‪60‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪60‬‬ ‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ‪61‬‬ ‫‪73 AE BKT‬‬ ‫‪107 Anynet +‬‬ ‫‪W‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪105‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪106‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ‪107‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻖ ‪108‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪115 ،18‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺎﻟﻴﺎﺕ )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ( ‪123‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﺐ‪7 :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ‪7‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ‪14‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻮﺑﺘﺮ ‪16‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪17‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ‪25‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ‪26‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪29‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍ
PAGE 126
‫‪ȦǍƷź‬‬ ‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪82‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ‪107 HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ‪51‬‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪105‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪109‬‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻴﻒ ‪43‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻖ ‪55‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ‪42‬‬ ‫ﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪29‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪93‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪104‬‬ ‫ﺹ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪104 AF‬‬ ‫ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪110‬‬ ‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ‪5‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ‪34‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺘﻴﻒ ‪74‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪77‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪88‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪118‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪
PAGE 127
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫)ﻧﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫)ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻊ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻔﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﺠﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ‪ .
PAGE 128
PAGE 129
‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻨﺎ ‪/www.samsungimaging.com‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‪.